Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 101

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 148 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii .

Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. 1 . you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. Finally.

2 .

Add basic MEP elements. and plumbing fixtures. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. such as duct. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. and piping. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. electrical. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. Germany. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. and plumbing engineering workflows.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. 3 . Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. such as mechanical equipment. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. electrical panels. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. fixtures. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. Add more detailed modelling elements.

is located and accessed in the training files location. views. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. On the Contents tab. So. Metric file names have an _m suffix. For example. templates. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. Metric: files for users working with metric units. as well as how to open and save them. such as templates and families. After completing each exercise. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. For example. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you can choose to save your work. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. however. However. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. Create detail views. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. when you add ductwork. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. When you open a training file. and sheets to document the project. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. and tags. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. In this exercise. to provide a richer and more finished design. Contact your CAD manager for more information. your Training folder may be in a different location. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. you learn where the training files are located. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. NOTE Depending on your installation. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. annotations. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. When you install the training files as instructed. Create schedules.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. You do not design entire systems. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order.

3 In the right pane. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. select the folder in which to save the new file. and click the Training Files icon. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. 8 If you have made changes.rvt. if you open settings. verify that Project Files (*. click ➤ Save As. and you can open any supported file type. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. enter the new file name. For Files of type. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location.rvt) is selected. a list of file types displays.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. and click Save. For File name. the Open dialog displays. Accessing Training Files | 5 . 4 Click the training file name. You may close the file with or without saving changes. you are prompted to save the changes.rvt and make changes. and click Open. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. scroll down. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. For example. double-click Imperial or Metric. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name.

6 .

the floor or roof remains connected. every drawing sheet. In this case. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. and schedules required for a building project. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. schedules. the operation of the software is parametric. the hierarchy of elements. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. hence. In the Revit MEP model. drawing sheets. the door retains this relationship to the partition. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. sections. ■ ■ 7 . Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. If you move the partition. 2D and 3D view. You learn the terminology. scope. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. quantities. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. the parameter is one of association or connection. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views. drawings. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. In this case. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. and phases when you need it. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. and plans. If the length of the elevation is changed.

and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. sprinklers. tags. filled regions. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For example. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. sprinklers.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. sinks. Datum elements help to define project context. walls and ceilings are hosts. Examples include detail lines. When you change something. boilers. and 2D detail components. and keynotes are annotation elements. dimensions. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. For example. levels. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. tags. grids. ducts. and electrical panels. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. sinks. and reference planes are datum elements. dimensions. For example. For example. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . and electrical panels. They display in relevant views of the design. For example. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. ducts. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. They help to describe or document the design. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. boilers. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. For example.

Understanding the Concepts | 9 . In Revit MEP. and so forth). or bottom of foundation. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. and ceilings. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. If you can draw. you do nothing to establish these relationships. and drawings of the design. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. first floor. This information includes components used to design the model. such as roofs. top of wall. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. views of the project. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. from geometry to construction data. programming is not required. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. To place levels. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. for example. schedules. section views. you can explicitly control them. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. you must be in a section or elevation view. The project file contains all information for the building design. By using a single project file. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. floors. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Project: In Revit MEP. Most often. elevation views. For example. However. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. families. North .This implementation provides flexibility for designers. and types.

A type can be a specific size of a family. Then experiment with them. System families include ducts. With a few clicks. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. identical use. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. You can also display several project views at one time. and similar graphical representation. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. Unlike system and standard component families. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. pipes. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. showing. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. and wires. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . hiding. For example. such as a A0 title block. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. or layer the views to see only the one on top. A type can also be a style.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. For example. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. each in-place family contains only a single type. For example. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. Type: Each family can have several types. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. However. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. System families can be transferred between projects.

Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. To return the panel to the ribbon. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab.

many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . then select what you want to modify. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. project and system parameters. architect-specific tools.. and CAD files. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. data and systems. tools used for editing existing elements. tools used for running analysis on the current design. and settings. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. and for switching views.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. tools used for managing and modifying the current view.. select the tool first. When working on the Modify tab.

This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. displays frequently used tools. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. closes the application menu (double-click). Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click).Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. provides requested information. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. when adding duct. By default. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . To keep a panel expanded. provides access to common tools. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. For example. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command.

NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. select a file to open... (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. click. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. select a template and create a new drawing. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. (Save As) export the current drawing. such as Export and Publish. (Export) On the application menu. (Open) save the current drawing... (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands.

(Licensing) close the file.. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session...On the application menu. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. family. but is not enabled by default. annotation. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. click. (Print) access product and license information. saves a current project.. to. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . (Publish) print the current drawing. provides views including Default 3D. or template file. Camera. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. publish the current project. family. or template file. and Walkthrough. To enable or disable a tool item. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. annotation. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down.

Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. When you are highlighting an element or component.To undo or redo a series of operations. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). a tool tip appears next to the cursor. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. Starting with the most recent command. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. workshared components. However. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. Group. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. This displays the command history in a list. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. When you are using a command. check the Status Bar. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. Clear the Status Bar check mark. Clipboard. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. when you switch to another editing mode. displaying the same information. or the Family Editor. repeat the command. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. In addition. To show the Status Bar again. To hide the Status Bar. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. Modify.

When you place an element in a drawing. click (Modify). select one or more elements of the same category. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon.To cancel or exit the current command. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. for example. To change existing elements to a different type. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. On the Quick Access toolbar. Place a Wall. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type.

For example. Zoom the view In the tutorials. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the following steps. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. click Training Files. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. There are several ways to access zoom options.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. 1 Click ➤ Open. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. After you are familiar with these tasks.rvt.

7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. click . 6 Click in the drawing area. NOTE As you zoom in and out.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. To modify or add snap increments. When you release the mouse button. the view zooms in on the selected area. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. If you do not have a wheel mouse. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. this is referred to as a crossing selection. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. In the drawing area. Modifying the View | 19 . on the Navigation bar. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. 9 To display SteeringWheels.

and click tin the Options dialog. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. press ESC. ➤ Options. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. 11 Click and hold the mouse button.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. moving the wheel to the desired location. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. 14 To exit the wheel. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. As you move the mouse. Click and drag to orbit the design. For more information about SteeringWheels. and then using the Zoom tool again. click the SteeringWheels tab. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. To define settings for SteeringWheels. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed.

Similar controls. referred to as shape handles. These are the drag controls. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. as shown. After you are familiar with these tasks.Design ➤ Floor Plans. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. bottoms. 3 Click and drag the bottom control. called drag controls.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view.Design. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view.HVAC Plan . Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. Small blue dots. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. 2 Enter ZR. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. and select the duct. and open Level 2 . display along the ends. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan.

All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. select the first item in the list. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. click the Undo command. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). In this example. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. 6 On the Undo menu. Move. All changes you make to a project are tracked. on the Standard toolbar. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. or press CTRL+Z.4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands.

After selecting the element to move. click to specify the starting position. 10 Move the cursor to the right. you want to move the duct. such as Move and Copy. for example. require 2 clicks to complete the command. The duct is moved to the new position. 11 With the duct already selected. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. In this case. and drag it to the left as shown. as shown. Performing Common Tasks | 23 .Some commands. and click again to specify the ending position.

13 To end a command. Select Mechanical .Supply. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 14 Enter VG.Return. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command.End a command Some commands. Click OK. Press ESC twice. For example. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. such as the Modify Ducts command. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed.

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

Finally. In that case. create and manage views. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. 7 In the Project Browser. 6 Click OK. and click Open. settings. 2 In the New Project dialog. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. such as ducts and pipes. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. New projects inherit all the families. under Create new. You can either select a template from the template library. 27 . such as coordination review and interference checking. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and geometry from the starting template. link files. and modify system settings. the default building levels and standard views. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. click Training files. and open North. You can choose from several templates. use copy/monitor. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). click Browse. 4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default. and loadable families. such as the default project units and settings. and open Metric ➤ Templates. system families. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. you learn how to start a project from a template. select Project. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions.rte template. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. under Template file.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. 5 In the New Project dialog.

and select the Systems-Default_Metric. you can select it now. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. click (Browse). TIP This template is the starting point for your new template.8 In the drawing area. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. Click OK twice. For example. click Edit. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .rte template and click Open. under Energy Analysis. (Browse). select School or University. ■ ■ Under Create new. ■ For Building Construction. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. NH. click Browse. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. select Level 1. review the construction materials listed. If you want to use a template other than the default. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. select Manchester. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. create another new project using the Construction template. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. for Energy Data. navigate to Metric Templates. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. When you select the material. select Project template. for City. Click Cancel. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. For Location. 10 Using the same method. In the Choose Template dialog. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. Click OK.

and fire protection systems. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines.rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark.00 mm. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. 110. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark.00 mm. 23 In the left pane. Holding CTRL. piping. 290. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. click Round. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. for 20. plumbing. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. under Duct Settings. click Wiring. ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. 27 Click OK. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. click Rectangular.000 mm. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. wiring. and demand factors for electrical systems. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. 22 In the right pane.00 mm. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. for 90. for 90.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. 26 In the right pane. After standard settings have been established for an organization. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 110.00 mm.00 mm. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns.00 mm. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project.00 mm. For Categories. power distribution systems.00 mm. 24 In the right pane. 33 Click OK. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . under Duct Settings. click Sizes. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 260. under Pipe Settings. 140. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. select Identity Data. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. Click OK twice. select Views. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. and 310. and 140. 25 In the left pane.rfa and click Open.00 mm.

36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. select View Name. 5 Click OK. Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. For Then by. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. under Create new. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. Select Ascending Click OK twice. 38 Close the file. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. For Sort by. 2 In the New Project dialog. For Then by. To enable this coordination. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. 4 In the New Project dialog. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. click Training. families. under Template file. Notice that the file is saved as a template. select Family and Type. Linking Projects In this exercise. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Browse.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. select Associated Level. From the Positioning list. select Project. and groups that are contained in a project. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. You need to create the MEP model for the project. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects.rvt. sheets. select Auto . Click Open. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. In addition. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. select Sub-Discipline. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design.Origin to Origin.

8 If necessary. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North . reposition elevations in the plan view as shown. select Room Bounding. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. 12 Click OK. under Constraints. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active.Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels. Linking Projects | 31 . select the linked architectural model. Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area. 11 In the Type Properties dialog.

23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK.Floor. click the level line for 03. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2. 24 Enter ??? and press ENTER. 17 On the Options Bar.16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog. click Plan View types. 19 On the left side of the view. 32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .

The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. If you modify a monitored element. click By Host View. appears above the copied elements. Linking Projects | 33 .Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model. and the level 4. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■ For Annotation Categories. and when the monitored elements are not synchronized. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab. then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. click the MEP level line labeled Level 1. 27 In the drawing area. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed. warnings notify you of any violations. highlight the linked model. and that the copied elements are monitored. click Custom. for the link file. level 3. a warning message displays. a copied monitored element in the host project has changed. indicating that a relationship is established. Using the Copy/Monitor tool. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements. After copying. 34 On the Basics tab. or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. select Custom. 29 In the drawing area. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2. and click to select the linked model. indicating that an element has changed.

Under Visibility. under View Properties. Click OK.■ ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. enter Mechanical View and click OK. click Custom. Under Visibility. Site. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 7 Click OK twice. right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North . Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. deselect Parking. Roads. click Edit. 5 On the Basics tab.Mechanical and click Apply View Template. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise. for Name. and Topography. 3 In the View templates dialog. select Custom. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 6 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Model Categories. Planting. you create a view template and apply it to your project template. 2 In the New View Template dialog. for V/G Overrides RVT Links. click Custom. deselect Levels. 36 Click OK. Click OK. for the link file. 34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog.

Modifying System Settings In this exercise.rte. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. and your username when using worksharing. select Invert background color. click Training Files. Notice that the drawing area is black. select Mechanical and click OK. 2 In the Options dialog. and click OK. you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. they are not saved to project files or template files. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. 5 In the New Project dialog. journal cleanup options. click Browse. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project. 9 In the Options dialog. 3 Under Colors. click the Graphics tab. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options. selection default options. under View Templates. under Template file. Modifying System Settings | 35 . notification preferences. These settings control the graphics. click the Graphics tab. 8 Click ➤ Options. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. 10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 7 Click OK.

18 Select the wall. 14 Click OK. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files.10 Under Colors. you specify default file locations. select None. and click OK. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 13 Under Notifications. the elements causing the error display using this color. 21 Close the file without saving it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. including your default project template. select One hour. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. 11 In the Color dialog. However. For Tooltip assistance. 2 In the Options dialog. select yellow. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. family template files. 19 Press ESC to end the command. click the File Locations tab. 12 Click the General tab. click the value for Selection color. 17 Press ESC to end the command. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. When an error occurs. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and family libraries. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color.

click Browse. and click Open. In the following illustration. Save. or loading a Revit MEP file. centralized. MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive.3 Under Default template file. under Default path for family template files. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. click Browse. click Browse. saving. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. TIP To view a template. you can start a new project with that template. Load. When you are opening. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. click Places. Click and click Browse to select a template. ➤ New ➤ Project. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. select the folder to save your files to by default. This path is set automatically during the installation process. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. 5 Under Default path for user files. 10 In the Places dialog. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. 4 Click Cancel. and you can create new libraries. note the list of library names. and Import dialogs. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. such as in a large. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. You can modify the existing library names and path. 7 In the Options dialog. However. Specifying File Locations | 37 .

and click Open. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. click the My Library icon. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . or families. Save. and change the name to My Library. click My Library. and Import dialogs. and click OK twice. templates. and click (Browse). The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. Load. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 15 Under Library Name. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. ➤ Open. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. and select it as the library path.11 In the Places dialog. click (Add Value).

3 Under Settings. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. and decal image files. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. such as bump maps. select Ignore words in uppercase. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 5 In the text editor. 27 Click OK. 19 Click Cancel. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 11 In the Options dialog. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. custom color files. 14 Click in the drawing area. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 12 Create a new project using the default template. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. If you want to relocate this path. click Edit. view the current path. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. This path is determined during installation. enter sheetmtl-Cu. click OK. 22 Select My Library. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. If you work in a large office. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 20 Click ➤ Options. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . click Edit. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 2 In the Options dialog. 21 On the File Locations tab. 9 In the text editor. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. click the Spelling tab. specify the new location here. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. (Remove Value) to delete the library. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. click Places.

Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. You can turn snap settings on and off. and enter 500 . As you zoom in and out within a view. click OK. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 21 Under Personal dictionary. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. you modify snap increments. 18 Click ➤ Options. 23 In the text editor. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. under Template file. 19 In the Options dialog. click OK. 20 Under Settings. click Restore Defaults. 25 Close the file without saving it. 22 In the text editor. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 .17 In the Spelling dialog. click Training Files.. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click the Spelling tab. under Dimension Snaps. work with snapping turned off. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 4 In the New Project dialog. you modify snap settings. click File menu ➤ Save.rte. 6 In the Snaps dialog. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. click Browse. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 2 In the New Project dialog. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. delete sheetmtl-CU. 24 In the Options dialog. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. click Edit. click Close. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. In this exercise.

if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. TIP To zoom while sketching. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. deselect Chain. 8 In the Snaps dialog. such as ZO to zoom out. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. This is the increment that you added previously. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. and move the cursor to the right. enter SM. use the wheel button on your mouse. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. zoom out until it does so. If it does not.7 Under Object Snaps. For example. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . snapping reverts to the system default settings. While sketching. If you do not have a wheel button.

17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 22 Move the cursor downward. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. it will snap to the endpoints. Do not set the wall end point. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. Notice that snapping is once again active. and delete the value 500 . 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. and move the cursor to the right.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 26 Close the file. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. and the wall edges. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 25 Click OK. the midpoint. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. with or without saving it. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall.. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. and specify the wall endpoint. 19 Enter SM. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. If you move the cursor along the wall.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. 43 . You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial.

44 .

you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. At the end of the tutorial. After applying a color scheme to the zones. duct system and a hydronic piping system. water source heat pump (WSHP). you first plan the system. If the tutorial training files are not present. However.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. methodology. you can choose to save your work. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. you design a mechanical system for an office building.autodesk. 45 . This system consists of a cooling tower. In this lesson. you will understand the process. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. After finishing each exercise. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. go to http://www. you first configure the linked architectural model. As you create the mechanical system. and then you create a plenum level. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. In this exercise. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. By following the recommended workflow. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.

The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. select Room Bounding. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. In this section. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . under Constraints. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. you add a level for plenums.rvt. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and click OK. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. roof. 1 In the Project Browser.Space Plan is highlighted. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . This makes the architectural components (such as walls. and double-click West . click Training Files. NOTE When working with a linked file. not in the MEP training file.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). and after the linked model highlights.MEP. indicating that it’s the active view. ceilings. Next. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. These components are defined in the architectural training file. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. click to select it. 6 In the Project Browser. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model.

and in the Plan View Types dialog. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. Preparing Spaces | 47 . enter 2600mm. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click Properties. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added.7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. Click Plan View Types. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. For Offset. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). 16 Press Esc. Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). right-click Level 2 Plenum. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. and click OK. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. The new level is placed. 9 On the Draw panel. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). and enter Level 2 Plenum. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. offset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above level 2.

In this exercise. for Level. you can choose to save your work. For Sub-Discipline. for View Scale. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. verify that 1 : 100 is selected. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. select Level Above (Level 3). and then place spaces in various types of areas. for Top. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for View Range. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. enter an Offset of 300mm. click Edit. For Cut plane. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. for Default View Template. right-click Level 2 Plenum. Under View Depth. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. Under Identity Data. enter 0. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . select Design. Under Extents. you place spaces in areas of the building model.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. In this exercise. ■ Click OK twice. and click Apply Default View Template. NOTE After finishing each exercise. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. select MEP . you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces.Plenum. select Plenum Plan. For View Classification. 20 In the Project Browser. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. and for Offset.18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. However. In the next exercise. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied.

indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. and ceilings). click Training Files. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. select Horizontal. For (Tag Location). Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_m. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Placing Spaces | 49 . For Upper Limit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Offset. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected.Space Plan is highlighted. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. walls. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. For Space. enter 0.rvt. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. select Level 2 Plenum.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select New. This specifies the vertical extent of the space.

enter 219.7 Click to place the space. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 14 In the drawing area. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Number. ensuring coordination between the files. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. enter Library. Click OK. For Name. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 9 Select the space. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum.

Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. For Offset. enter 0. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. For Upper Limit. 21 Using the method learned previously.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Placing Spaces | 51 . select Level 3. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. and then click Modify. 18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down.

under Energy Analysis. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. you place a space in a large corridor area. and then split the space using a space separation line. 23 Click OK. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .22 In the Instance Properties dialog.

Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . and for Offset. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Space Plan is highlighted. and then press Esc. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. click Training Files. for Upper Limit. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter 0. 5 On the Options Bar. select Level 3. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_m.

10 Click in the number column. 9 In the schedule. In the schedule. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. which was numbered 219Q. click in the name column. and select Corridor.7 In the Project Browser. and scroll to the newly placed space. and change the space number to 216A. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. 15 Press Esc twice. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221.Notice that the tag updates with the number change. as shown. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. 11 Close the schedule view. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 .

The new space is numbered correctly (216B). 18 Close the file with or without saving it. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. you place a space in a chase. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . place a space in the lower area of the split space. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise.16 Using the method learned previously.

3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. click Training Files. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty).rvt. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint.Space Plan is highlighted. If necessary. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_m. indicating that it’s the active view. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown.

6 Enter VG. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. select the space. For Offset. right-click. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Interior and Reference. In the plan view. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 10 In the plan view. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. 12 Click in the section view. On the Options Bar. enter 0. click in the chase area to place the space. select Roof Level. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and then click OK. expand Spaces. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view.4 Press Esc. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. for Upper Limit. for Upper Limit. and click Element Properties. select Level 3.

Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. floors. 15 Press Esc.■ For Limit Offset. enter 225PC. enter Chase. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. All spaces in the view are tagged. and click OK. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. under Loaded Tags. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59 . select Space Tag-No Name : Space Tag With Volume. 17 Type ZF. Under Identity Data. and maximize the view. for Name.Space Plan. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. ceilings. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. Bounding elements (such as walls. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. enter 1200. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. For Number.

and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m. To display space reference lines. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. click Training Files. under Spaces. After a space is placed in an area. click View ➤ Zones. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. In the left pane of the Open dialog.20 Close the file with or without saving it. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. click Reference. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . it is automatically added to the Default zone. which removes the space from the Default zone. indicating that it’s the active view. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. In this exercise. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Zoning is highlighted. In the next exercises.

and verify the zones in the System Browser. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. The Zone tool is active. Next. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_m. The graphic in the System Browser updates. As you do this. To display space reference lines. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. under Spaces. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. and a new zone is created. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.Zoning is highlighted. you assign spaces to a zone. indicating that the space is occupiable. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . the Edit Zone tab displays. under Energy Analysis. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space.The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). click Reference. double-click 121 Cafeteria. select Occupiable. ) or 5 In the System Browser. you assign spaces to zones in the building. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog.

and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). Instruction 221. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. Instruction. select Computer Lab 222. 5 With the drawing area active. and click Finish Editing Zone. and Electrical 220 spaces. type VG. you need to activate the zone visibility. In the System Browser. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. select HVAC Zones. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. Using the Edit Zone tab.NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. Expand HVAC Zones. you can add or remove a space from the zone. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). 4 In the drawing area. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and modify the zone properties. Click OK. To view the zone in the drawing area.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 11 Close the System Browser. and verify the zone in the System Browser. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.West . expand 2 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_m. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. under Spaces. click Finish Editing Zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. The new zone name displays in the System Browser.Zoning view to activate it.TIP After you finish editing the zone. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser.Zoning is highlighted. for Name. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In this exercise. and click OK. click Training Files. 10 On the Edit Zone tab.Area B. To display space reference lines. 5 Click in the Level 1 . click Reference. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. enter 2 .rvt.West . and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone.Zoning. You activated zone visibility in the views. 9 In the System Browser. under Identity Data.

64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click in the Level 2 .6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. zoom out. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. 8 In the Level 1 . 10 Click Finish Editing Zone.Zoning floor plan. 15 Press Esc.Zoning view. Verify that the distance is 12mm. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Select Attached End. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected.Zoning view. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. 9 With the Add Space tool active.

Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. double-click Level 1 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries.Zoning to make it the active view. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m. and click OK. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values.East. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the corner where the Top.Zoning view. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Area C. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. and zone information. for Name Value. you verify the building. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. In this exercise. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. 4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). 19 Close the file with or without saving it. Front. on the ViewCube. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . space. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. enter Lounge . click Training Files. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. double-click the zone tag. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise.rvt. and select 109 Lounge. verify that Wireframe is selected.

TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. select 1_South_Area C. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. With 109 Lounge selected. Next. you isolate the space.The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. ■ Click (Highlight). All spaces in the zone display in isolation. Using the Highlight tool. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. ■ ■ On the Details tab. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. click (Isolate). Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands.

Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . click . the zone information displays for the selected zone. select Lounge/Recreation. For Electrical Loads. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. click . View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. Below the list of spaces and zones. verify that <Building> is selected. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. For Cooling Information. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. For Heating Information. click . verify that <Building> is selected. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. click (Shading). This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. This indicates the heating set point. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type.11 °C : 32. verify that 23. and click OK.33 °C : 12. and humidification set point. and then click OK. heating air temperature. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. scroll down in the left pane. Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C. Next. For People. ■ ■ ■ Next. and in the People dialog. and air changes per hour. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. This indicates the outdoor air per person. the space information displays for the selected space. verify that 21. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine.22 °C : N/A is specified. Below the list of spaces and zones. Next. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space.22 °C : N/A is specified. cooling air temperature. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. For Construction Type. This indicates the cooling set point. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. outdoor air per area. select 109 Lounge. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information.6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. and then click OK. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). and dehumidification set point.

Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. For Offset. open MEP . and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space.NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. and other room-bounding components. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. roofs. 12 Using the methods learned previously. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. floors. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. 15 In the Project Browser. Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. select Level 3. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. enter 0. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. click Cancel.

23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. Under Energy Analysis. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. you verified building. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. select Plenum. for Number. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. Because this is an unoccupied space. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. For Name. Click OK.Modify space properties 19 Select the space. Under Energy Analysis. space. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. enter 212P. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. and verify that the space has replaced the void. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. select Plenum. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. and zone information. and select space Plenum 212P. In this exercise.

enter 03101. right-click. For Ground Plane. verify that 300 is specified. is selected. under Energy Analysis. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . verify that Manchester. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. select space Library 219. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_m. For Postal Code. verify that <Building> is specified. for Energy Data. and click OK. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). Click OK twice. ■ ■ In the Type Properties dialog.rvt. click Edit. click in the Value field. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. For Export Complexity. In order to select a space. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. On the Weather tab. On the Place tab. this option adjusts the times automatically. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. you need to select this option.Space Plan. double-click Level 2 . 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. 8 In the drawing area. For Sliver Space Tolerance. verify that Level 1 is selected. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. For Building Construction. verify that New Construction is selected. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. select School or University. and click OK. for City. click Training Files. and click Element Properties. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. For Project Phase. under Volume Computations. For Location. for Building Service. NH. When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. If.

For Sensible. click Edit. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. 12 Click the Details tab. select Heated and cooled. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. for Values. Under Power. select Actual. enter 45 W.Audio Visual. for Values. a cooling load. or neither. and then click . click in the Value column. for Values. both. select Actual. For Location. ■ ■ For Electrical Loads. You have verified the building information. Next. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. Select Area per person. is specified. click Edit. For Building Service. verify that <Building> is specified. Under Heat Gain (per Person). and click OK. verify that School or University is selected. For People. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. select Specified. and click to learn the cause for the warning. For Building Construction. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). select Library . enter 60 W.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. verify that Occupiable is selected. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. NH. Select the space associated with the warning. For Latent. verify that Manchester. for Values. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. and enter 15 sq. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. Click OK twice. For Space Type. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . select Specified. Click OK. m. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. For Condition Type. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type.

click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. 21 Click OK. click Information). and under Heating Information. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. and click OK. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. or make any changes to the model. 16 After you review the loads report. space. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 17 In the loads report. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. under Energy Analysis. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. weather. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. click Calculate. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . and zone information for the building model. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. space. There should be no warnings displayed. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. or zone information. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. verify that Heating Set Point is 21. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. 19 In the drawing area. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. You should correct the space error in the building model. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise.11°C. select 219 Library. select 219 Library.click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. and a loads report displays. The Electrical Loads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads. 15 Review the loads report for project. In this exercise. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library.Space Plan. and can be modified here.

You want a scheme that allows for a greater range. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Click OK. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click to the right of the building to place the legend.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .rvt. in relatively small increments. select HVAC Zones. Notice that the cooling load is based on watts. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . 5 Zoom in to the legend. 3 In the drawing area. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. For Color Scheme. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_m.

select the color scheme legend. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select Cooling Load .Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. The new scheme displays in the view. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. under Schemes. and click OK.Expanded Ranges. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

In the left pane of the Open dialog.Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_m. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. In the next exercise. click Training Files. 11 Using the method learned previously. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document.rvt. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements.

For Phase. enter . the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. Click OK. enter Airflow Delta. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. and then click . select Air Flow. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. Select Formula. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Spaces.Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. for Formula. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. more category options are available. select HVAC. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. In the Schedule Properties dialog. select New Construction. enter Space Airflow Schedule.Space Fill is the active view. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. In the Calculated Value dialog. ■ Click Calculated Value. For Type. Select Schedule building components. For Name. for Select available fields from. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. In the Fields dialog. select Spaces. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. and click OK. Under Available fields. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. For Formula. select Calculated Supply Airflow. Click OK. click (Browse). For Discipline.

6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. and then click Conditional Format. click the color swatch. For Value. For Fields. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. In the Color dialog. and then select Hidden field. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. verify that Show is highlighted.Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. For Then by. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. and click OK. select red. Click OK twice. right-click to access schedule properties. select Level. For Background Color. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. Select Ascending. and Blank line. a view opens that contains the selected space. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s. ■ The schedule displays. enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Test. Under Conditions to Use. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. select Level. select Airflow Delta. select Number. Header. select Not Between.

This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. In later exercises. In the next lesson. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces.Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. 78 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. In this exercise.

you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. you modify air terminal parameters. As you place the air terminals. and work with the airflow schedule. After completing the air systems lesson.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. you will create supply air systems. 79 . you size ductwork and validate your air system design. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). In this lesson. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. After system creation. Then. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems.

and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 In the ceiling view. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 .HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. When you highlight a space using the cursor.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and scroll to space 223. the space crossing lines display. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. click Training Files.

enter 215 L/s. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. type 3600. 15 On the Options Bar. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. and select M_Supply Diffuser . If the host element is modified or moved. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. 13 On the Options Bar. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. and press Enter. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . as shown. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. click Place on Face. verify that Constrain is cleared. 17 Move the cursor down. The schedule updates with the new flow data. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. and then select both Copy and Multiple. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. for Flow. and press Enter. which in this case is the ceiling grid. 9 On the Placement panel.8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. select the diffuser. and then press Esc to end the command. Also. the hosted elements are updated as well.

and then press Esc. Next.rfa. 21 On the Options Bar. click Yes. 25 In the drawing area. and click Open. click Place on Face.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. As you place the return diffusers. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. 24 In the Open dialog. as shown. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. 27 Select M_Return Diffuser . 29 Place 2 diffusers. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s. navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag. clear Leader. 22 In the drawing area. select one of the diffusers. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 28 On the Placement tab. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object.

Level. and click OK. select Strong Reference. as shown. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. click Yes. and click to select the lines. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . for Reference. under Other. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. select one of the return diffusers. 31 In the alert dialog. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. 32 In the Project Browser.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. as shown. select the vertical grid line as shown. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan. align the other return diffuser. 37 In the Family Already Exists dialog. zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown. click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. 40 In the drawing area. 43 Using the same method. 84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project.You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. and then select the top edge of the diffuser. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. and then press Esc twice.

and click Element Properties.44 While pressing Ctrl. clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser. As you place the air terminals. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left. and on the Options Bar. clear LeftArrow. you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule. 48 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click. and press Enter. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85 . 46 In the Instance Properties dialog. you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. select both return diffusers. under Mechanical. and click OK. enter 310 L/s. 47 Using the same method. for Flow.

and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115.rvt.HVAC Plan . and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. and double-click Level 1 . 9 On the Options Bar.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . click Training Files. the space crossing lines display. click 1 : 100. verify that Tag on Placement is selected. for Scale. 8 In the Type Selector. Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser.200 Neck.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. expand HVAC . 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_m. select M_Supply Diffuser . When you highlight a space using the cursor. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. click to place the air terminal in the space as shown. 10 In the drawing area. and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. at the lower left corner of the building.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design to make it the active view. 86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 2 On the View Control Bar.

Airflow. your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. move the cursor down. Click OK. Under Mechanical . the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. Also. type 6000.The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. ■ ■ 13 With the diffuser still selected. you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. for Offset. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■ In the Instance Properties dialog. As a result. under Constraints. By copying the diffuser. the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag. enter 2400. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. 11 Select the diffuser. enter 170 L/s. for Flow. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87 . the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used.

19 Select each of the untagged diffusers. select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right.16 Using the same method. clear Leader. 18 On the Options Bar. and then press Esc. 88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.

25 Click OK 3 times. Type. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. click Edit.Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type. tile the windows. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule. and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. and click View Properties. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range. and then right-click in the schedule. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89 . Mark. Next. For Category. because you are modifying the digital database of building information. 29 Using the same method. 26 Using the method learned previously. for Sort by. type. for Embedded Schedule. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. under Available Fields. select Air Terminals. mark. 27 In the schedule. and press Enter. under Other. for Flow. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. double-click System Type. select Mark. it is a negative value. enter 210 L/s. select 21. under space 115. you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s. 23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule. and Flow.

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone.HVAC Plan . 90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. and maximize Level 1 . 31 In the drawing area. as shown. Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule.Design. As you highlight the zone. select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115.

39 Press Esc twice to end the command. and under Energy Analysis. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . 35 In the Type Selector. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 33 Click OK. verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955.97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531. 36 In the drawing area.Horizontal .Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW.High Efficiency .43 W (approximately 1. zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space.7-18 kW .32 Open the Instance Properties dialog. select M_WSHP . 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.3 times the heating load).

4 If the System Browser title is Zones. and click View ➤ Systems. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. indicating that it’s the active view. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. including energy analysis. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_m. for Constraints ➤ Offset. enter . After creating the logical connection. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. 6 Keep the System Browser open. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. and click OK. In this exercise. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. the space crossing lines display. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . As you add diffusers to systems. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections.rvt. When you highlight a space. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. However. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. You then create the logical connection between the system components. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. right-click the title. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc.Design is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan . select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. 44 Zoom in to space 115. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment.

8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. the air terminals are the children. and Flow value. 12 In the System Browser. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. System Name. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. review the Number of Elements. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. 15 Click Cancel. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). On the Options Bar. access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. Connect Into. the number of elements is updated. and the system connects them. 18 Click OK. 17 Using the method learned previously. 11 In the drawing area.Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment.

25 Click OK. In this exercise.rvt. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. which updates the name in the System Browser. under Mechanical. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. for System Name. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. In this exercise. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. 22 Click OK. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_m. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. you also use the System Browser to validate systems.Rename the system Next. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Identity Data. for Mark.

and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. enter 3000.Round. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. For Duct Type. A Generate Layout tab displays. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). 5 On the Options Bar. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . In this case. the Network type provides several solutions. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. For Offset. For Offset.Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. For Flex Duct Type. 7 On the Options Bar. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees.Design is highlighted. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. enter 3000. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . Select Branch. click Settings. Also. for Solution Type. select Network. which provides various layout tools. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. and display solution 1. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. For Duct Type. select the upper left diffuser. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 4 In the drawing area. indicating that it’s the active view.HVAC Plan.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . the space crossing lines display.

a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. Either relocate the system components. select a different layout solution. as is the elbow itself. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers.■ ■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length. as shown. and use the drag control to drag it to the left. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. 11 Click Finish Layout. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Click OK. For example. you’ll get an error in a later step. enter 900. or manually modify the duct. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. click Modify. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. or offset elevations are incorrect. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added.

NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. select Duct Color Fill . The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. Using a flow-based color scheme. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. The first time you press Tab. Usually. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. and click OK. highlight a segment of the main duct. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. If the entire network does not highlight. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. and click to select it. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment.Flow. thus it is not part of the system. for Color Scheme. a disconnection exists. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. and equipment. fittings. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect.

and click OK. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. but not all values are used in this view. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. select By View. 20 In the drawing area. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Flow. and press Enter. and then click OK. 17 In the Type Properties dialog.Airflow. under Mechanical . and on the Options Bar.Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. decrease the flow value by 50 L/s. under Graphics. note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s). select one of the diffusers in the system. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. select the WSHP. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. for Values Displayed.

24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. select Calculated Size Only. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. Select Restrict Height. and select 400. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. and then press Esc to clear the selection. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. Select Only. click Cancel. select Duct Color Fill . The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. 26 Click OK. and enter . Select the upper segment of main duct.21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP.Velocity. Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). and then click to select it. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. Under Constraints. select Friction. for Branch Sizing. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. highlight a segment of the duct.65 Pa/m. select the color scheme legend. Click OK. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . for Schemes. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and drag it to the right. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method.

Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. Using this tool. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. pressure. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. static pressure. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. and pressure loss.The ductwork and fittings are updated. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). Use the information that displays (flow.

Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. 35 Click Finish. click Training Files. also known as the critical path. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system.NOTE As you inspect a system. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. Manually Creating Ductwork | 101 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_m. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct.Design is highlighted.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .HVAC Plan . 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). and click Draw Duct. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. and select the WSHP. indicating that it’s the active view. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and click to specify the end of the main duct. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel.

for Offset. 15 On the ViewCube. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height.3D MEP. 14 In the Project Browser. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 11 On the Options Bar. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. Front. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. click the corner where the Top.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. NOTE When drawing duct. select the top right diffuser. and click Draw Duct. double-click MEP .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. enter 3000. right-click the connector grip. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system.

18 Make the floor plan the active view. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. in space 115. it is considered a closed loop.Click this corner Resulting view orientation 16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. The ductwork is automatically created. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 19 In the drawing area. select the top unconnected supply diffuser.

Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. and select the top left diffuser. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. Branch ductwork in 3D Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. 25 Press Esc. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. You can ignore the warning.22 Using the same method.

To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations.Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. 30 Press Esc twice. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. 28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. and then click Modify. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . zoom in to the open end of the main duct. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view.

under Mechanical . such as a plenum. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Constraints. and click to select it. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. for Flow. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . and then click OK. 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. clear Restrict Height.Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split).Airflow. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. select a segment of the main duct. 40 Using the same method. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. and click OK. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog.

108 .

you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. In this lesson. 109 . or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. including 2 base mounted pumps. Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. Create return and supply piping systems. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. Then. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. and a cooling tower located on the roof. you place mechanical equipment. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. Automatically and manually lay out piping. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. on level 3 of the building model.

5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.Design is highlighted.7-18kW . 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . In the left pane of the Open dialog.HVAC Plan . as shown. indicating that it’s the active view.Horizontal High Efficiency . in corridor 328. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m.Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down.Left Return . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and select M_WSHP . and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. click Training Files.

click the dimension. and enter 600. and click to place the dimension. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . click the top edge of the WSHP. 10 Select the WSHP. verify that Wall faces is selected. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. 8 Click the corridor wall face.NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 7 On the Options Bar. as shown.

and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. and in the Type Selector.11 Press Enter and then press Esc. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. verify that the WSHP is still selected.) 14 Click Modify. select the 2 WSHPs. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. as shown.

Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. as shown.75 L/s. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. enter 0. enter 2750. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. Under Mechanical. and click to place it in the mechanical room. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 .16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Click OK. for Water Flow. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 Click Modify. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. for Offset.

IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. but without a corresponding system. Unlike logical connections (systems). physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. analyses cannot be performed. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Create pipes to physically connect the system components.22 Close the file with or without saving it. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. including flow and pressure. Create the logical connection between the system components. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. you create the return and supply piping systems. You can create pipes to connect system components.

Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. As you assign equipment to systems. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. This display indicates that the system is selected. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. 5 In the System Browser. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Piping System | 115 . select the 2 WSHPs. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. and click View ➤ Piping. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. Assigning a system component to an existing system. Therefore. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. while pressing Ctrl. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_m. where it is easier to review the information. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. right-click the Systems column heading. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. click Training Files. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Mech 330).Design is highlighted.rvt. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned.HVAC Plan . In the System Browser. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space .

12 In the drawing area. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 13 Click Finish Editing System. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. 10 On the Options Bar. for System Name. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and the Edit System tool is not active. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. Notice that on the Options Bar. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously.9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. for System Name. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 17 On the Options Bar. select the boiler. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. You have created the hydronic return system.

Creating a Piping System | 117 . and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. double-click Roof . and click OK. 23 Close the roof plan view. 22 In the Select Connector dialog. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH.HVAC Plan . 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. under Design ➤ HVAC . You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. 25 Select the boiler. In cooling mode. select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out. 19 In the Project Browser. and bypasses the cooling tower. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return).18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.Design. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment.Design ➤ Floor Plans. In heating mode. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 26 Click Finish Editing System. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. and select the cooling tower.

and click Select. under Mechanical. You also manually modify the layout path as required. and click OK. enter 0. including the flow rate and size of the component. and click Properties. 29 Right-click CHWS. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. expand the Hydronic Return system category. and click Column Settings. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. and click OK. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. and click Expand All. expand Piping. indicating the logical connection. In the System Browser. 32 In the System Browser. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser.8. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. you can view several parameters. for Water Flow. 28 Using the same method. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog.

You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_m. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . When you draw a box to select components. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan.HVAC Plan . the boiler. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. and click OK. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. you can place the cursor over a system component. click Check None. and click to select it. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . select Mechanical Equipment.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. then the Select a System dialog displays. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering.Mech 330). 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 5 In the Filter dialog. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors).rvt. press Tab to highlight the system. A system preview displays in red. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red).

structural beams. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. For Inset. duct. 11 On the Options Bar. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. It does not reference the architecture. select CHWR. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800.9 In the Select a System dialog. verify that Solutions is selected. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. click Settings. select Perimeter. 13 Click Cancel. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 10 Click OK. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. ■ ■ 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. or architectural components. enter 450. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green.

Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. With each Tab.75 L/s. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . you modified the flow value for the WSHPs.16 Click Finish Layout. the flow for each WSHP is 0. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. to display the path with thinner lines. 17 Optionally. and press Tab 3 times. 19 In the drawing area. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler.

23 Under Mechanical.50 L/s. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. 22 Select the boiler. and click OK. under Mechanical. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.75 L/s).50 L/s. verify that the value for Flow is 1. 24 Press Esc. and access its instance properties.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. notice that the Water Flow is 1. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. click Edit System.Design ➤ Floor Plans. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan . the Number of Elements is now 8.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 27 On the System Tools panel. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.Design. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 28 In the Project Browser. Logically. 32 Click Finish Editing System. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. double-click Level 1 . and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. On the Options Bar.

as shown.94 L/s.Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below.50 L/s. 34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. so the total flow of 6.44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1. note that the value for Flow is 4. Next. which propagates flow throughout the system. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4. access its instance properties. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6. and click Cancel. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .44 L/s. 35 Using the drag control.94 L/s. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. 38 Using the same method. you physically close the CHWR loop. under Mechanical. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System.

41 Click OK. For Inset. select Perimeter 1 of 5. enter 450. select CHWS. select a WSHP. Click Settings. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. and then click OK. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset.Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . For Slope. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. enter 0. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. 40 In the Select a System dialog. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS).00%.

you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. 47 In the drawing area.45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. as shown. The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. In a later exercise.) 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. 48 While pressing Ctrl. (Both sections are at the same elevation. 46 Click Modify.

as shown. 50 Using the same method. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. 51 Click Finish Layout. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. To create the piping system. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system.49 Select the 4-way arrow control. or offset elevations are incorrect. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. you: ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. select a different layout solution. or manually modify the pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127 . NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Either relocate the system components.

rvt.Design is highlighted. As you work in the training file.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. double-click 3D Building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .HVAC Plan . as shown. and the return pipes are magenta. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser.■ ■ Add piping to close the supply loop. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation.Design ➤ 3D Views. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_m. indicating that it’s the active view. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple.

as shown. 6 Press Delete. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . 7 In the plan view. select the section of piping.

9 In the 3D view. and press Esc to clear the selection. select the boiler. ■ Move the cursor up 100 mm. Click to specify the reference point. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. ■ Click to move the piping.

12 In the 3D view. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. and click OK. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. and the lower one is secondary. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . select the boiler. 13 In the plan view. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water In. select the return pipe riser. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. and click Draw Pipe. The connections are automatically created.11 In the Select Connector dialog.

and you select 1 connector. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. ■ Move the cursor down. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. for Offset. and press Enter. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. enter 600. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. enter 381.In a plan view. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. Add another 600 section of pipe to the right.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water In. and the appropriate fittings are created. 19 In the plan view. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. As you place piping runs that are close together. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. and click OK.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. 18 Press Esc twice. select the primary base mounted pump. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump.

NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. and select it. right-click the bottom connector.Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. as shown. and click to draw the pipe. 24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you select the tee fitting. and click Draw Pipe. and click the minus symbol. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 .27 Move the cursor to the right. and when the connector point displays. click to connect to the pump.

select the primary base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe. 31 On the Options Bar. right-click the discharge connector. for Offset. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. and click to create the pipe. 29 If necessary. enter 1200.28 Press Esc.

these pipe connections were created automatically. Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .33 Press Esc.

and click Draw Pipe.Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . right-click the bottom control on the tee. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. 36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. as shown. 35 Using the method learned previously. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump.

Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. and press Enter. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 .■ Move the cursor down. for Offset. type 300. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click to create the pipe. enter 2850.

Next. you validate the flow through the system. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .37 Click Modify. You now have a closed loop system.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . notice that under Mechanical. right-click. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 42 Click OK. Connect the cooling tower Next. as shown. 48 In the plan view. select the cooling tower. and click Element Properties.50 or 50% of the Flow.44 L/s. The flow is being propagated through the piping. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. and click OK. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. under Mechanical. 43 Press Esc. for Cooling Water Flow.22 L/s (1/2 of 6. In the Instance Properties dialog.44 L/s). 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. 41 Using the same method. right-click. and click Element Properties. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. under Mechanical. view the properties for the secondary pump. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 In the 3D view. 46 Press Esc. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . the value is 0 L/s.Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. which is rounded up to 3. notice that Flow is 6. When you create the pumps in parallel. 40 Click Cancel. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system.

142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). ■ Lower pipe (outlet).

and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. 50 In the 3D View.44 L/s. select the cooling tower. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 143 .Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. 49 Press Esc. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 6. and close the dialog.

Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt.HVAC Plan . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_m. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower.52 Close the file with or without saving it. and is heated by the boiler. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. click Training Files. the water bypasses the cooling tower. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . When the valve is open. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). as shown.Design is highlighted. Adding Valves In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .

and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. Adding Valves | 145 . NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.4 On the Options Bar.50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. and select M_Ball Valve . The bypass valve is closed by default. 8 Press Esc twice.

12 Select M_Ball Valve .50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 14 Using the same method.10 Press Esc. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . place another M_Ball Valve .50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. parallel to the previously placed valve.

Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. verify that Flow is 0 L/s. validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s. and click OK.15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve.44 L/s. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). and click Element Properties. validate that the Flow is 6. under Mechanical. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. Adding Valves | 147 . 19 Using the same method. right-click.

148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. and select M_Ball Valve . Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s. 22 Using the method you just learned.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). (This valve allows the water to flow through it. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog.■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. In heating mode. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately.44 L/s. and select M_Ball Valve .rvt.44 L/s. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s. click Training Files. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. 20 Select the bypass valve. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 6. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters.50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. validate that the Flow is 6. Initially.

This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods.Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. and click OK. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . select Pipe Color Fill . and click OK. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection.Size.HVAC Plan . click Pipe Color Fill . as shown. for Schemes.Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Sizing Pipe | 149 . indicating that it’s the active view.Flow. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. 4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.

select a different layout solution. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. enter 1. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. select Friction.5 m/s. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. or manually modify the pipe. and for Velocity. or offset elevations are incorrect. 13 Press Esc. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). Click OK. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. Select And. for Branch Sizing. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. Under Constraints. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. and click to select the branch.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. and enter 220 Pa/m. Either relocate the system components.

The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_m. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. and double-click 3D Building.Design ➤ 3D Views. Inspecting the System In this exercise.rvt. click Training Files. pressure. 3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. Using the System Inspector. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Inspecting the System | 151 . you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system.14 Close the file with or without saving it. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level.

The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). flow. Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. and pressure information including pressure loss. An inspection flag reports the section number. as required. This information helps you modify the system design.NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. as shown. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems.1 Pa.7. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser.4 Pa.Note that the Flow is 1. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. for Fluid Temperature. inspect Section 6 again. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans. select 32° C. and the Pressure Loss is 7160. and double-click Level 3 .3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125. and to size pipe.0 L/s. you need to validate them.Design. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . Warnings display. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 9 Using the same method. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure.HVAC Plan . Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834. click Training Files. and click OK. 10 Click Finish. targeting those systems that need attention. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties.rvt. the Static Pressure is 41916.

expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. right-click Hydronic Return. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. 9 Right-click CHWS. 154 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 4 In the System Browser. and click Show to view all of the system components. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. After you have assigned all components to systems. click Close. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. 6 In the Project Browser. and select Level 3 .HVAC Plan . double-click Level 1 . notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed.Design floor plan. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). and for pipe sizing. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. As you learned when placing components. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder.Design ➤ Floor Plans. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. If you place components without assigning them to a system.HVAC Plan . and click View. 10 Using the same methods. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. 8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. and confirm unassigned system components. the pipe is associated with that system. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. In the System Browser. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. For example. TIP If you have multiple views open. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. right-click the Systems titlebar. otherwise. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. 12 In the System Browser. 7 In the System Browser. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). thus assigning the components to a system. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views.Design. and click Expand All. After you assign components to a system. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. expand the Unassigned folder.

13 Right-click CHWR. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. 14 Using the methods that you learned. Checking Piping Systems | 155 .

156 .

157 .Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.

158 .

You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 159 . you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. Define required lighting.

Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. click Training Files. For Factor.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. ■ ■ ■ For Temperature. For Material. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m. For Temperature. As you place components and create circuits. select Copper. distribution systems. In this exercise you review electrical settings. select Copper. You also add a wiring type. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Name. expand Wiring . enter 1. ■ Click New Correction Factor. ■ ■ For Material. enter THHN. select 90. click (Open). speeding up the design phase. Click OK. Select Correction Factor. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. enter 70. select Wiring Types. 160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and demand factors that are applied in the design.04. wiring.rvt.Wire Sizes.

For L-G Voltage. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. For Maximum. Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Voltage Definitions. select Hot Conductor Size. select Power. enter 2000. select 3. Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane. Select Neutral Required. For Value. enter 120/240. For Minimum. enter 240. select 120. Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. For Wires. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. enter 220. Click Split. select THHN. select Single. enter 250. For Max Size.0. select 75. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. enter 1. enter 240. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Load Classification. select 240. select Distribution Systems.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Temperature Rating. By specifying a range. For L-L Voltage. For Conduit Type. For Insulation. For Neutral Size. For Neutral Multiplier. select 10000 VA. Under More Than. Specifying Electrical Settings | 161 . The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. enter 50. For Phase. select Steel. Click OK. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor. select Demand Factors. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218. select Spaces. select Electrical . select Illuminance. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . because the key is linked to your new project parameter. In this case the key style is the type of space and. Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser. enter Required Lighting Level. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. click (Open). You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). For Discipline. Under Categories.Lighting Plan. click Add. under the Electrical . and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_02_m. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces.rvt. click Training Files. under Parameter Data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Later in the tutorial. and double-click Level 2 . and conference rooms. For Group Parameter Under. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces. For Type of Parameter. you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog.Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. such as offices. 5 In the drawing area.Lighting group in the space element properties. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.Design ➤ Floor Plans. restrooms. 162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Verify that Instance is selected. select Electrical. its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK twice.Lighting. Defining Required Lighting In this exercise.

under Electrical .Lighting.6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 9 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Category. under Available Fields. double-click Required Lighting Level. select Spaces. 16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. Select Schedule Keys. and for Key Name. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 17 Complete the table by entering the following: Defining Required Lighting | 163 . and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed. For Name. enter 485. enter Lighting Levels. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row. Click OK. note the Required Lighting Level parameter. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column. Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. enter Space Lighting Requirements.

21 Click OK twice. change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element. which is mapped to project units. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice that as you enter the data. the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level. 164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Sort By. click Edit. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser. for Sorting/Grouping. 22 Using the same method. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .Lighting Plan. Select Blank Line.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. select Required Lighting Level.The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type.

Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. The only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. click (Open). under Identity Data. you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Later in this exercise. 27 Click OK. since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. Note that under Electrical-Lighting. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting. that Required Lighting Level is blank. select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165 . In this exercise. the value input applies only to the selected space. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value. for Lighting Levels. Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog. which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog.25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value. or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key.

for Name. ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the scheme for 400 lx. then the new value will be 400 lx. and click (Add Value). and in the At Least column. For Color. Select the scheme for 500 lx. Select the scheme for 450. and press ENTER. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. click (Add Value) again. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_03_m. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. enter 900. Under Schemes. ■ Select the scheme for At Least 200. for Title. then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.00 lx. if you select the value for 200 lx and click Add. verify the By Range is selected. Select the scheme for At Least 20. If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add. enter Required Lighting and click OK. This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after.00 lx. Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. enter Required Lighting Levels. Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. select Spaces.00. ■ With the scheme for At Least 200. 00 lx still selected. 3 In the New Color Scheme dialog. enter 200. for Category.00. enter 800. and press ENTER.00 lx.rvt. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Schemes. For example. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . click (Duplicate). and press Enter. select Required Lighting Level. and click (Add Value) five times. ■ Click OK.

13 Click Calculated Value. and Required Lighting Level. and double-click Level 2 . select Illuminance. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Spaces. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Name. Click OK. For Color Scheme. The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created. For Type. Level.Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser. select Spaces. For Discipline. enter Lighting Delta. For Name. Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK. click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 8 In the drawing area. Average Estimated Illumination.Lighting CF. double-click Number. 11 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ For Category. select Electrical. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting .Design ➤ Floor Plans. for Available Fields. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. select Required Lighting. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 167 .

select Red. 168 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Click OK twice. select Level. Click OK. for Sort by. for Formula. Click Background Color. On the Formatting tab. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. type a hyphen. For Value. Select Blank Line. click Browse. enter -55 lx and 55 lx. press the spacebar. under Condition. and click Browse. ■ In the Calculated Value dialog. select Lighting Delta. for Custom Colors. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. Click Conditional Format. Select Header. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. at the end of Average Estimated Illumination. for Fields. select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK three times. for Test. select Required Lighting Level. ■ ■ ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog.■ For Formula. select Not Between.

The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 169 . 16 Close the file with or without saving it.

170 .

power circuits. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. as you place lighting fixtures. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. Then. First. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. Create a panel schedule. 171 . and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. Create power loads. Use the System Browser to check your design. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied.

Click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 200 lx. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . Under Scheme Definition. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. select the color for Less Than 200 lx. 2 In the drawing area.rvt. click Training Files. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. select Orange. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . select Average Estimated Illumination.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. click (Open). By using orange as the color for this range. 8 In the Project Browser. You can create additional color schemes. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend.Lighting Ceiling plan. for Basic Colors.Lighting CF view is open. 7 In the Project Browser. select the color legend. for the Spaces Category. In the Color dialog.

As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated.10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. zoom to space Library 219. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. The red field will clear once Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. which is the lowest value in the specified range. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). indicating a value greater than 0 fc. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. 13 Click the Level 2 .

the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated.277V. 20 Select the lighting fixture. the fixtures will move accordingly. In the Space Lighting Analysis view.5 fc range is satisfied. The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. 19 Press ESC to end the command. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. 18 Click to place the fixture. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) .the +/. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule.5 fc range. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc.

23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 177

The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 179

The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

43 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. In the Name dialog. scroll to view space space Library 219. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Edit Type. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate.3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. for Apparent Load.00 VA. enter 162. Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx. ■ Under Electrical Loads. for Name enter and click OK.

7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. for Ballast Loss Factor.ies and click Open. select the top center fixture. Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. click the value for Light Loss Factor. select 463T5_S. Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. select Luminous Flux. enter . Junction Boxes. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. 2 In the drawing area. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. and receptacles to your design. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_m. 11 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. enter . Under Electrical. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Color Preset. specify 15000.00 lm. select Xenon and click OK. Placing Switches. In the next exercise. and click OK. ■ Click Apply. for Type Mark. Junction Boxes. ■ Click OK twice. Under Photometrics. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. Placing Switches. click Training Files.93. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. zoom to space Computer Lab 222.85. you add switches. Click OK. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. junction boxes. 10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type.rvt. ■ Under Photometrics. Under Photometrics. Under Photometrics. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. In the Select File dialog. click the value for Initial Color. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. for Lamp. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog.■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. select T5 [HO]. 9 In space Library 219. and Receptacles | 183 . enter F15. click (Open). click the value for Initial Intensity.

6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor . 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face.277V.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 7 Click to place the switch.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared .

8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. Placing Switches. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices.NoLoad.rfa and click Open. and Receptacles | 185 . Select M_Junction Boxes . Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Junction Boxes. 9 Press ESC to end the command. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector. The element type M_Junction Boxes . 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. 12 In the Load Family dialog.

note the Number of Poles is 1. for Mark.14 Press ESC to end the command. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. Click Edit Type. Under Electrical. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box.Offset. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 21 In the drawing area. In the Type Properties dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. Click OK twice. zoom to space Library 219. NOTE When entering values. for Level 2 . you can enter a space to separate the unit values. enter JB-1NL. 15 Select the junction box. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . enter 2750.

and Voltage. Placing Switches. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Space Number. and Number of Elements. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Select Load. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. right-click and click Column Settings. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Distribution System. Junction Boxes. 26 In the System Browser.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and Receptacles | 187 . Space Name. 24 For any column. This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit. Expand Electrical. NOTE If necessary. 23 In the System Browser. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Select Size. Expand General. Click OK.

Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 31 Close the System Browser. 35 Select the dimension and enter 3650. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard.

and Receptacles | 189 . move the cursor along the wall.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Placing Switches. select Copy and Multiple. and enter 3650 and press ENTER. 41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. 38 Select the receptacle. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. Junction Boxes. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. 40 On the Options Bar.

43 Press ESC to end the command. enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .42 Move the cursor down.

45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 191 . Placing Switches.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.

Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .48 Close the file with or without saving it. you need to create logical connections to define the topology.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and work toward the higher voltage. click Training Files. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). Adding wiring to a project is optional. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_m. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). 2 In the drawing area. 4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment.equipment. click (Open). zoom to the space Electrical 220.208V MCB . then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created.rvt.Surface: 100A.

17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . for Max. #1 Pole Breakers.5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 8 Select the panelboard. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . Click OK. select 480/277 Wye. enter 20. For Panel Name.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown.480V MCB . 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter LP-2B. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 9 On the Options Bar. select 120/208 Wye. for Max. enter PP-2B. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Loads. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . #1 Pole Breakers.Loads. for Distribution System. 14 Select the panelboard. For Panel Name. 15 On the Options Bar. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. enter 20. Click OK. for Distribution System. 7 Press ESC to end the command.

Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. Click OK. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 20 In the drawing area. zoom to space Instruction 221. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. which is the logical connection between the elements. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . click Check None. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. and for Category. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 23 In the Filter dialog.

26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.

28 Press ESC to end the command.27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 .

33 Select the switch on the right. 32 Press ESC.31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down.

right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 38 Press ESC to end the command. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. 37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.35 Select the left three-way switch.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4. 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.39 Using the same method. 42 In the Filter dialog.Loads. 44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . except without wire. 43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Next you create circuits without showing wire. add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit. Click OK. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. click Check None. Click OK. and for Category. enter 2. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. select Wires. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click Training Files. and create permanent wiring. 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click (Open). and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_m. for Hot Conductors.rvt. 2 In the drawing area.

10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Expand Electrical. and then expand circuit 1. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 13 In the System Browser. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. right-click on the Systems heading. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. Rating. and verify that Load.4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. expand Power. Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221. and Voltage Drop are selected. Click OK. Voltage. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. Distribution System.

20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. Click Tags. under Electrical.18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. 30 Close the System Browser. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. change the Voltage to 277V. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Click OK. 22 With the junction box still selected. Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit.

click Edit Type. select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard. Click Yes. under Identity Data. click below the first one to place it. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 47 In the drawing area. select Break. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 40 Click OK twice. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. for Type Mark. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. For Circuit Number. 36 Select the upper-left fixture.33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. notice the label parameters and click Cancel. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . enter FR4. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 In the Edit Label dialog.

enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. enter a comma. 57 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. 61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures.■ ■ Deselect Break and for Suffix.rvt. Click OK. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 62 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a switch system. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area. 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. for File Name. and click Apply. and select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. 59 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. Click OK. Click Save. 54 Select all of the tags. 58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 52 In the Save As dialog.rfa. click (Open). select Lighting Fixture Tags. 60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. and for Category. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_m. click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags ➤ Element Panel ➤ drop-down. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system.

enter a. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Creating a Switch System | 205 . Click OK. 2 In the drawing area. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. under Electrical Lighting. for Switch ID. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 9 Select the occupancy sensor.Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open.

Click OK.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. for switch ID. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. enter b. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. under Electrical .Lighting. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall.

Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). lighting. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_m. Next you create a circuit and size wire. click (Open). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK. select the PP-2B panel.rvt. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. enter 2. 8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. for Hot Conductors. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Click OK. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. and for Category.26 Close the file with or without saving it. Circuits are used for power. 4 In the Filter dialog. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and data systems. Creating Power Loads | 207 . 2 In the drawing area. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In space Electrical 220.Loads. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. click Check None. select Electrical Fixtures. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space. under Electrical .

select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark. and click to select the circuit. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. navigate to Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. select M_ Hook Wire Tick Mark. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Wiring. 19 Click OK. 15 In the Load Family dialog. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family.13 Select the wire again. and in the right pane. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. and click Open. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222.rfa. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. and in the drawing area.

click the connector of the first receptacle. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. select the PP-2B panel. 22 In space Electrical 220. as shown.21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 26 Press Delete. 28 In the drawing area. Creating Power Loads | 209 . in space Instruction 221. as shown. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. 29 In space Instruction 221. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown.

There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. Next you balance the loads for your design. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun.

for Rating. Scroll down. 1-#12. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. After re-balancing loads. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. Finally. Had there been a greater imbalance. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. click Rebalance Loads. the distribution is shifted. click Training Files. Under Electrical-Loads. 2 In the drawing area. click Open. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_m. 4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits.Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. select panel LP-2B. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. enter 30A. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. ■ ■ Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. zoom to space Electrical 220. 6 Click OK. Click OK. 1-#10. 1-#12. 3 In the Electrical space. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog.rvt. 1-#10.

Loads. 12 Select panel PP-2B. 17 Close the warning dialog. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating.Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. enter 40A. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. and click OK. under Electrical . 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Next you create a panel schedule. 15 Select panel PP-2B. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. under Electrical . enter 25A. and click OK. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 24 Click Select Panel. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. for Rating. select the transformer TP-2B. for Rating. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 14 Close the warning dialog. and click Finish Editing Circuit.Loads.

The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. click Edit. Under Header Text. Select PP-2B. enter 4 mm.Panel Schedules. for Font Size. The Panel Schedule Report displays. for Appearance. and open E601 . You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. enter 5 mm. click (Open). 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click OK. click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select Berlin Sans FB. expand Sheets (all).rvt. 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. select Bold and Italic. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. 4 Close the report. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. 7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Under Body Text. click Training Files. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. for Font Size. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. Under Header Text. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . under Other. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. 6 In the Project Browser. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. 10 Click OK twice. for Font.Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 5 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_m. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1.

9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. press TAB once. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once. click Training Files. notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1. There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1.rvt. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click (Open). 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall. In the System Browser. each with a load of 180VA. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_m. Expand Unassigned. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1. select space Lounge 212. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

17 In the drawing area. 16 Close the details dialog. select MDP-1. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 18 Select panel LP-2C. Checking Your Design | 215 . expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. zoom to space Electrical 214. under Warnings. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. for Panel. 14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. In the System Browser. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 20 On the Options Bar. 15 In the dialog.12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning.

216 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 .

218 .

Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping.Vent. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m. right-click PVC . and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. Adding a pipe size.Sanitary.Plumbing Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Name dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. planning is critical to a successful design. type PVC . 2 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. 219 . You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems.rvt. In this exercise. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system.Design is open. click Training Files. and click OK. in addition to loading existing families. you create a PVC pipe type. In this lesson. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. and verify that Level 1 .

5 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. PVC . select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. enter 45. under Mechanical. 25 For Outside. 24 For Inside Diameter. Cross. Tap. 13 In the right panel. enter 10°. under Pipe Types. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.DWV: Standard. click Pipe Settings. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Metric\M_Trap P .293 mm. enter 46. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected.PVC . 17 In the left pane.rfa. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. select Sanitary.000 mm. 27 For the new pipe size. 15 For System Type. 6 Click OK. 22 Click New Size. select M_Tee Sanitary . for Pipe Connector Tolerance. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . enter 54. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. In the Project Browser. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. 18 For System Type.Sch 40 . 21 In the right pane. 10 On the Selection panel. click Training Files. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog.PVC . for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. and click Main. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. enter -1250. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . Tee. select None. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. select Plastic. for Nominal. select Tee. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. for Material. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. select Sanitary. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 26 Click OK. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane.DWV: Standard. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings.006 mm. and click OK. select Branch. click Modify.Sch 40 .Vent is listed.PVC . For Offset.DWV.Sch 40 . select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent .

vent. sanitary piping. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. and hot and cold water piping.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. Create the hot water system. Create the sanitary plumbing system. add a hot water heater. including plumbing fixtures. 221 . Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. Create the cold water system.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System
This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

Click

➤ Open.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

select one of the components in the system. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. for example. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 .Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. 16 In the Select a System dialog. A preview of the piping layout displays. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. at the midpoint of the detail lines. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. The base is placed. select Sanitary 107. a toilet. and click OK. as shown.

for Diameter. 26 For Pipe Type. 30 Click Modify. enter -1225. and click Settings. 29 On the Options Bar. 23 For Pipe Type. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point.Sanitary. 28 On the Options Bar. for Solution Type. and modify it to meet project requirements.05%. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 21 On Options Bar. The default settings are automatically modified. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. select PVC . 25 In the left pane. 24 For Offset. for Slope. enter 1. 27 For Offset. and click OK. select Main. enter -350 mm. 20 On the Generate Layout panel.19 On the Options Bar. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. select 100 mm. select PVC . You accept this suggested solution. select Intersections. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. enter -350 mm. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. and for Offset. select Branch. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements.Sanitary. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. click Solutions.

and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point.Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl. select the vertical route path segments. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . 32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).

and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown. 35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets.33 In the 3D view. use the ViewCube to orient the view. as shown. 34 Click Modify.

adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . click Finish Layout. 37 On the Generate Layout panel.36 Using the previous method.

38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing . select the fitting and click to reorient it. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 39 Click to select the fitting to the drain. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . When a fitting is reversed.Overall. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation.

and check the slope control. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. as shown. adding sinks in the men’s room. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. you continue with the work from the last exercise. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet.

in the Type Selector. click Training Files. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line. and verify that Level 1 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Rectangular.Design is open. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser.Plumbing Plan . 5 On the Placement panel. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select 560 mmx560 mm . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .rvt. 4 On the Element panel. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107).Public. as shown. under M_Lavatory . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_m.

Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. enter 711. ■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. and press Enter to create a second sink. select Multiple. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.7 Click Modify.2. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . 8 Select the sink. On the Options Bar.

■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. ■ Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 15 Click the 3 sinks. click Add To System. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 11 In the System Browser. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Press Esc. enter 711. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system.2. 12 In the drawing area. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. and press Enter to create the third sink.

Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. 19 In the 3D view. double-click 3D Plumbing . and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. In the System Browser.Design ➤ 3D Views. 20 Select the fitting. 21 Select the tee. use the ViewCube to orient the view. as shown. under Design ➤ Plumbing . notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . click Finish Editing System.16 On the Edit System panel. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Overall.

25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. 23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. press Spacebar. 27 Click Modify. for Slope.22 In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe. enter 760 mm. for Offset. 24 On the Options Bar. with the tee fitting selected.05%. 26 On the Options Bar. When you press the Spacebar. and click Apply. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. and click to draw the pipe. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). enter 1. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

29 In the Type Selector.DWV.PVC . and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. move the cursor over the stub pipe. under M_Wye 45 Deg Double . and when the vertical center line displays. 31 Click Modify.Sch 40 . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . click to place the fitting. select Standard. 32 Select the double wye fitting. 30 In the 3D view.

37 Select the fitting. 34 Press Esc.33 With the fitting selected. In the next steps. you add pipe segments to the double wye. double-click the section head to open the section view. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the right connector. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. for Offset. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. 36 In the section view. and press Enter. enter 305 mm. enter 150 mm. zoom in to the double wye fitting. on the Options Bar. and press Enter. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . 42 Click Modify. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. 41 Using the same method. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°).Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 40 Click Modify. and click to place the pipe. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered.

and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. right-click the bottom connector. and press Esc. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 48 Click Modify. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. press Spacebar. enter 150 mm. 49 Using the same method. and click Draw Pipe. 47 Move the cursor down. 46 In the section view.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping.

51 In the Type Selector. 55 In the 3D view. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. 54 Click Modify. 53 Using the same method. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. 56 Using the same method.DWV. select Standard. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks.PVC .50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. under M_Trap P . You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. select the P-Trap on the left. 52 In the plan view.Sch 40 .

Move the cursor to the left. and click Draw Pipe. Click Modify. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. select the left P-Trap.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. and press Enter. enter 150 mm. Select the double wye pipe on the left. connect the right sink to the double wye. 58 Using the same method. Click in the plan view.. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. In the plan view.

In the Type Selector. while pressing Ctrl. Press Esc. as shown. and select a proposed solution.■ In the 3D view. click Finish to select the recommended solution. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. On the Routing Solutions panel. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. under Pipe Types. select PVC Sanitary. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. select the section of pipe you just drew. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. while pressing Ctrl.

05% is selected. for Slope. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_m.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. adjusting the sanitary stack. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 65 Close the file with or without saving it. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. click Finish. and verify the slope. 62 On the Options Bar. verify that 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. click Training Files.

as shown. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 5 Select the tee. 3 In the Section view.Floor level line. 7 On the Selection panel.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 .Sch 40 .Overall. and click the intersection to place the fitting. 9 In the Type Selector. click Modify. right-click the top connector.Plumbing Plan . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee.Design. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . and click Draw Pipe. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend . select the elbow fitting on the right.Design. 10 In the 3D view. and click to draw the pipe. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. select the vertical stack.PVC . and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing.DWV. select Standard. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. 15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System
In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_m.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For System Name, enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Diameter, select 20 mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm. For Slope, enter 0%.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe, enter 140 mm, and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255

44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System
In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_m.rvt.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, select 2.3 L. 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ ■ ■

Diameter: 25 mm. Offset: 2000 mm. Slope: 0%.

Press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 25 mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261

44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.43 In the 3D view. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe.

Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .46 Close the file with or without saving it.

264 .

265 .Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.

266 .

This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.rvt. In this tutorial. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. and click Duplicate. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. In this lesson. click Training Files. 2 Right-click Standard. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. you can choose to save your work. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. 267 . Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. If the tutorial training files are not present.autodesk. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. go to http://www. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. However. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. You create a new pipe type.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. After finishing each exercise. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial.

In this exercise. In the left pane. 6 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. you create project parameters and work with schedules. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. For Offset. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. structural beams. and then click OK. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. verify that 2800 is selected. For System Type. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. For Offset. select Main. select Fire Protection Wet. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. click Rename. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. duct. verify that 2800 is specified. In the next exercise. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. under Mechanical. select Fire Protection Wet. 9 Click OK. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. you modify the type properties of the pipe. For Pipe Type. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. for Material. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. However. Next. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. and click Properties. select Carbon Steel. For Pipe Type. For System Type. or architectural components. and enter Fire Protection Wet. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type.

rvt. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. enter Sprinkler Zone. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . When you highlight a space using the cursor. select space Instruction 221 as shown. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. select Fire Protection. for Name. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. select Spaces. right-click. under Fire Protection. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. Under Categories. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Click OK twice. For Group parameter under.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_m. 6 In the drawing area. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. 8 Using a crossing window. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. the space crossing lines display. select the upper half of the building. enter Zone 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Element Properties. for Sprinkler Zone.Fire Protection Piping Plan . click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. and then click OK.Design is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Add.

14 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then access instance properties. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. enter Zone 2. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then click OK. verify that only Spaces are selected. under Fire Protection. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. select Zone 1. under Fire Protection. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. for Sprinkler Zone. and then click OK.rvt. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. to which you add various parameters. 13 Using the same method. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_m. including a calculated value parameter. you create schedules for sprinkler design. 10 In the Filter dialog. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. for Sprinkler Zone.

For Rounding. and on the ribbon. select mm. For Key name. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. For Name. enter Maximum Spacing.Fire Protection Piping Plan . For Group parameter under. select Millimeters. double-click on each column separator. and click Field Format. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. select Fire Protection. click Add Parameter. 15 In the new row: ■ In the Protection Area Type column.Design is highlighted. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. enter Light. indicating that it’s the active view. 7 Click OK. For Units. For Unit symbol. select Maximum Spacing. Select Schedule keys. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Using the same method. The schedule displays. 14 Select the new header. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 10 In the Format dialog. for Name. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. select 0 decimal places. For Type of Parameter. Obstructed-Combustible. select Spaces. click the Formatting tab. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Length. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. Click OK.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 11 Click OK twice. 9 On the Formatting tab. enter Protection Area Construction Type. Click OK.

16 Using the same method. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. In the Maximum Coverage Area column. For Name. Unobstructed Extra. and press Enter. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . enter 4575. select Spaces. enter Sprinkler Schedule. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. enter 40. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing Maximum Coverage Area Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Unobstructed Ordinary.■ ■ In the Maximum Spacing column. Click OK.

and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. and click OK. select Minimum Sprinklers. Click OK. In the Fields dialog. Enter the formula operator / after Area. select Fixed. select Common. For Rounding. 19 Click the Formatting tab. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). select 0 decimal place. For Type. under Available fields.Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter Minimum Sprinklers. For Units. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing ■ ■ Click Calculated Value. For Discipline. click . For Formula. select Number. 20 On the Formatting tab. select Area. and click Field Format. 22 Click OK twice. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area.

for Sort by. and then select Hidden field. select Number. For Then by (second instance). select Level. Select Header and Blank line. for Sorting/Grouping. For Fields. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog.Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. select Hidden field. For Fields. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. ■ In the Format dialog. At the bottom of the dialog. Select Header and Blank line. select Level. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. Under Field formatting. and then click Field Format. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . select Minimum Sprinklers. select Sprinkler Zone. select Sprinkler Zone. select Grand totals. For Then by. 26 Click OK 3 times. under Other. verify that Use default settings is selected. and select Totals only. and click View Properties. click Edit.

32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. for Filter by. for Fields. double-click Type. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. for Filter. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. click Edit. under Other. select Level equals Level 2. 30 Click OK twice. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. and Count. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. select Grand totals. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. and click View Properties. Under Field formatting. click Edit. select Sprinklers. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . System Name. and click View Properties. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. For Category. The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. for Available fields. select Count. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. and select Totals only.27 In the drawing area. for Embedded Schedule. On the Formatting tab. delete the word Maximum. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Calculate totals. right-click the schedule. select Embedded Schedule.

47 In the Instance Properties dialog. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. 50 Access the instance properties. select space 221 Instruction. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 43 Click Cancel. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 41 In the plan view. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. under Identity Data. 48 In the floor plan. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. under Identity Data. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. select space 221 Instruction. and access the instance properties. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog.Fire Protection Plan Design. 44 In the schedule. Unobstructed. Unobstructed. 46 With the space still selected.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Ordinary. select Ordinary. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. and click OK. but their values are not determined. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. double-click FP . for Protection Area Construction Type. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. select Light. and the spacing parameter values are evident. As a result. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. Unobstructed. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. under Identity Data. 52 Click OK. for Protection Area Construction Type.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

you can choose to save your work. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. As you create the system. you will understand the process. As you place the sprinklers. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and double-click Level 2 .com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. go to http://www. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.autodesk. After finishing each exercise. If the tutorial training files are not present. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.rvt. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. At the end of this tutorial. By following the recommended workflow. 279 . and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. However.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. methodology. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise.

open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . When this happens. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. 3 In the Project Browser. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. When there is a small misalignment. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. After placing the initial sprinkler.

Adding Sprinklers | 281 . Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 205. verify that Constrain is cleared. Also. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. as shown. and click to place 3 sprinklers. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. 13 On the Options Bar. select the sprinklers that you placed. and 207. 12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. while pressing Ctrl. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. 10 Press Esc twice. 9 In space Instruction 202. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. 11 In the drawing area. 206.

and then press Esc. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. specify a vertical offset. as shown. you place non-hosted sprinklers. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. 200B. and 200C). 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. Next.Fire Protection Piping Plan .Design. 17 In the Project Browser. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. you place non-hosted sprinklers. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point.15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. open Design ➤ FP . 18 Type WT.

it’s added to the space at an offset of 0. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. 25 Click OK. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. For Number. move the cursor to the right. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. Next. In this exercise. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. and press Enter. you adjust the offset.19 In the floor plan. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. under Constraints.0. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. enter 11. After creating the logical connection. and with piping (physical connection). and click Element Properties. enter 4100. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. Notice that the schedule updates. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. In the next exercise. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify Creating a Piping System | 283 . Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. 29 Press Esc.FP_Ceiling view. This number is determined in the schedule. enter 2900 mm. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. for Offset. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Right-click the sprinkler.

5 Right-click the header. 2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . However. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and select Piping.pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. click View ➤ Systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing.rvt. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. 1 In the Project Browser. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_m.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. As you assign sprinklers to systems. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. as shown. Unlike logical connections (systems).Fire Protection Plan . click Training Files.Design is highlighted. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. indicating that it’s the active view. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building.

and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and click Select. double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers. within the Piping Systems folder. indicating the logical connection. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system.8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. select an initial piping layout. Creating a Piping System | 285 . You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. and select the system. place the cursor over a sprinkler. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. In the System Browser. 11 With the system still selected. Next. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. press Tab. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. named Fire Protection Wet. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet .

13 In the System Browser. enter FP Wet_Zone2. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 22 On the Options Bar. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. enter -3650. these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm). for System Name. click Solutions. 12 On the Options Bar. for Diameter. 15 In the drawing area. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. and number of elements in the system. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. select 150 mm. 14 Click Finish Editing System. When the layout is finished. providing system editing tools. The Generate Layout tools are activated. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. click Settings. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. For Pipe Type. verify that Main is selected. and on the Options Bar. and a piping layout preview displays. system equipment. 19 Click OK.Wet is selected. verify that 2800.0 is specified. In the left pane. click Place Base. 23 For Offset. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . select Branch. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch.The Edit Piping System panel displays. as shown. For Offset.

Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. click Modify. and green represents branch lines). A (parallel movement control) displays. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. On the Generate Layout panel. and select solution 4. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. In general.25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. Creating a Piping System | 287 . The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. verify that Network is selected. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions.

The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. or manually modify the pipe. 32 If necessary.28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. Either relocate the system components. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 29 Click Finish Layout. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . or that offset elevations are incorrect. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. select a different layout solution. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. as shown. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.

rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.Design is highlighted. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. indicating that it’s the active view.Fire Protection Piping Plan . and then you create piping to physically connect them.33 Close the file with or without saving it. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. and various manual pipe creation tools. and select the elbow fitting as shown. 3 If necessary. 2 Zoom in. the Connect Into tool. Next. click Training Files. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them.

The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. click Finish Editing System. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. click Add To System. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. and so on) are logically connected by a system. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. or a system component to display system tools. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). you can select the pipe or duct. 9 On the Edit System panel. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor.4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 8 In the corridor. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. and pipe or duct is created. radiators. air terminals. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. mechanical equipment. 5 In the drawing area.

and then tile the views. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. 12 On the Options Bar. 14 Close the System Browser. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. 20 Open Design ➤ FP . 23 View the result in the 3D view. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. verify that Network is selected. 18 Click Finish Editing System. and select solution 5. verify that Solutions is selected. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 13 Click Finish Layout. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.11 On the Generate Layout panel. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor. 21 In the Piping Plan. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. for Solution Type.

and then press Esc.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 28 In the drawing area. 29 Using the same method. Layout in 2D 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 25 Select the sprinkler. draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . right-click.24 In the Piping Plan. for Offset. 27 On the Options Bar. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. and click Draw Pipe. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. select 2800.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. 31 In the plan view. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point.Fire Protection Piping Plan . You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. 4 On the Options Bar. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is highlighted. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_m.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . for Scale. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. ■ Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293 . Because the whole system highlights. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint.Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. select 1 : 50.rvt. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system.

Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . double-click on the section head to open the section view.6 Press Esc. 8 Right-click. and click View Properties.

and click Draw Pipe. drag the top section boundary line up.Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list.Design. select MEP Section. and then right-click the top connector. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. and click Apply Default View Template. click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown. and then click Modify. For View Classification. and select Hose Reel Cabinet . 10 In the Project Browser. and press Enter. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 13 Select the elbow fitting. and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 17 Move the cursor up. 12 If necessary.Design the active view. 18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 14 Select the tee fitting. 22 In the drawing area. Click OK. for Sub-Discipline. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. For Default View Template. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295 .Fire Protection Plan . Under Identity Data. select FP . enter FP Section_Stair. for View Name.Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. right-click Design ➤ FP . 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 19 Make Level 2 .Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 2135. select Design. 15 Press Spacebar.

23 In the section view. 26 On the Options Bar. right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps).Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. for Diameter. verify that Automatically Connect is active. zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. and click Draw Pipe. 25 Verify that Fire Protection . and then click Modify. 296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . select .

click Yes to load a family. A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe. and click Open. 32 In the Open dialog. 33 In the Type Selector.50 mm is selected. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297 .rfa. navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm. as shown. 31 In the alert dialog. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. verify that M_Gate Valve .29 Close the section view. and then click Modify. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet.

You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown.35 Open 3D Fire Protection. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_m. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design ➤ 3D Views. 298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

7 On the Options Bar. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. width. 8 Click Modify. draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet). click Check None. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. 5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select 25mm. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299 .NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. Changing the diameter. and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. height. width. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. or width. All selected piping is now 1" diameter. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 6 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. starting at the lower left corner of the wing. for Diameter. it’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs. 4 In the floor plan view. or height.

select the linked architectural file. 18 In the 3D view. Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view. 17 On the View Control Bar. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. . and click Open. zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 12 If necessary. Press Esc.Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view. click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog. 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. click to place the tag. By hiding the linked file. Clear Leader. 13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. and after each segment highlights. select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.rfa. 15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments. 14 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. 300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment. and when the section highlights. select 100mm. 21 On the Options Bar. for Diameter.19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301 . The main piping is selected and displays in red. press Tab. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes.

and then tag the piping as shown.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 23 Close the 3D view. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers. 24 In the drawing area. 26 Using the same method. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and maximize the floor plan. 25 On the Options Bar. as shown. select 40mm. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205. for Diameter. The pipe diameter is modified.

Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. For additional practice. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. you created a wet fire protection system. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. In this exercise.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. You added tags to pipes. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. In this tutorial. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe.

304 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. 305 . add annotations and dimensions. create details.

306 .

You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view.rvt. click Training Files. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . dependent views. under Floor Plans. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m. and click OK. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and view references. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. 2 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and apply a view template. matchlines. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 307 . right-click Copy of Level 1. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. and click Rename. If the view included detail graphics. and click Properties.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. and click OK. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. 10 In the drawing area. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A.rvt. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. 6 In the Project Browser. and click Apply Default View Template. views and put them on the sheet. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. 4 Using the same method. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale. more focused. as shown. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. create dependent views for areas B and C. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. click Training Files. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. and then press Esc. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. 7 Close the file without saving. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_m. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 Click OK. and click OK.

click the current value. For Line Pattern. 19 In the drawing area. 13 Press Esc twice. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select black. and click OK.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. select 11. In the Color dialog. Click OK. 14 Click Finish Matchline. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. For Line Weight. select Double Dash . Creating Dependent Views | 309 . and then press Esc. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline.

select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. as shown. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. 21 Using the same method.20 Select the upper view reference and. on the Options Bar. 25 Using the same method. for Target view.

Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. and select the section box. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. and zoom to each of the view references. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data.rvt. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 4 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. click Training Files. For Default View Template. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. right-click 3D Plumbing. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. enter Plumbing Isometric . In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. select Plumbing Isometric. 27 Using the same method. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 .Domestic Water. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. for View Name. and click Properties. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_m. 2 Zoom in. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets.

select 3. 6 In the Project Browser. and then click OK. 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight.Domestic Water. For Pattern. The section crop lines no longer display. and click Apply Default View Template. For Sub-Discipline. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 7 Select the WSHPs in the view. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. Click Apply. select Dash. 8 Zoom in to the plumbing system. right-click Plumbing Isometric .■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. select Plumbing. 9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) piping. for View Classification. press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run. select Documentation. and click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. 10 Right-click. and click to select it. Click OK.

press Tab 3 times. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm. 13 Using the same method.12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . and click to select it.

press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click to select it.14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe. 15 Right-click. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. as shown).

For Slope. ■ ■ Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units.5mm Arial. 19 Using methods learned previously. select 1. and for Default View Template. click on the Format value. 21 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ For Discipline. Click in the drawing area to start a text label.16 Press Esc. 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate 3D Plumbing. and in the view properties. Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. 18 Label the fixtures as shown.Isometric.Sanitary Waste. verify that Common is selected. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. On the View Control Bar. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 315 . and in the Type Selector. rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . specify Plumbing .

select To the nearest 10. When the view is associated with a sheet. you use a plan view to create a callout view. as shown. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. 22 Click OK twice. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it. and click to place the spot slope annotation. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_m. for Rounding. 26 Press Esc twice. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. and then place the callout view on a sheet. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. 25 Move the cursor above the pipe. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.■ In the Format dialog. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. indicating that it’s the active view.

select 1 : 50.2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan). 5 On the Options Bar. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. Creating Callout Views | 317 . 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. for Scale. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right.

drag it to the sheet. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. select 5. and select the viewport. 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . double-click M601 . Click OK. Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view.Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. using the same method. under Sheets (all). 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. 13 In the Project Browser.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ For the Callout Boundary category. for Line Weight. Expand the Callout Boundary category and. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser.

Click OK. enter WSHP PART PLAN. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. and click Apply Default View Template. For Title on Sheet. for View Name. right-click the callout view. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. Creating Callout Views | 319 . 17 In the Project Browser. For Default View Template. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information.15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. Ductwork in coarse detail Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.

21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down.19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. and click Apply View Template.24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. 26 In the Rename View dialog. enter Typical WSHP Detail. right-click the detail view. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. 25 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click OK. Creating Callout Views | 321 . and click OK. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Rename. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. under Names.

322 .

and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. click Training Files. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m. Creating Annotations In this exercise. and annotation to create a legend. symbols. linetypes. duct tags. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. work with model-based components. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. 323 . as shown. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. you learn how to: ■ ■ ■ add text notes.

8 With the text still selected.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 9 Press Esc twice. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and select 1. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

Use the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box. select a supply diffuser. 16 In the drawing area. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. verify that Leader is cleared. Creating Annotations | 325 .Add leaders 10 Select the text box. and then click Right Straight. as shown. 15 On the Options Bar. and a segment of rectangular duct. The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. a segment of round duct. a return diffuser. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts.

under Category. click Load. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . clear Leader. as shown.rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. you can annotate the element with a second tag type.17 Click Modify.rfa. select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. 22 In the Tags dialog. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. for Ducts. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. 20 In the Tags dialog. 24 On the Options Bar. If necessary. and click OK. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. 21 In the Load Family dialog. verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 25 In the drawing area. and click Open.

select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 32 In the drawing area. and Attached End. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Leader. select Horizontal.26 On the Options Bar. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. Creating Annotations | 327 . and then press Esc. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. 31 On the Options Bar. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser.

328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . for Leader. select Free End.33 On the Options Bar. 36 Press Esc twice. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 34 In the drawing area. as shown. then click to the right to place the leader as shown. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point.

Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. you use temporary dimensions to locate. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Leader Arrowhead. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. not simply an instance property. 40 Using the method learned previously. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. select the last tag placed. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. That’s because you changed a type property.Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. and click OK. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. and all elements of that type are affected. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_m. 37 In the drawing area. and lock lighting fixtures. lay out. indicating that it’s the active view. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. Creating Dimensions | 329 .

5 Click to create a permanent dimension. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 13 Press Esc. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. select the dimension line. 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. 14 Using the same method. On the Options Bar. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. 12 Click EQ. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. and then select the interior face of the wall.

annotation symbols.Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line. Because the dimensions are locked. 20 Using the same methods. Creating a Legend In this exercise.rvt. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. linework. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. enter 2430. 16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and notes. 17 Press Esc. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. 19 Select the dimension value (3376. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. click the 3 interior locks on the line. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. click Training Files. Creating a Legend | 331 . and offset them from the wall. and press Enter.9). and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_m.

Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select Air Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser . ■ 9 In the drawing area. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . 10 Using the same method. click below the title to place the diffuser.200 Neck. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . Click OK. enter Diffuser Legend.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 Click in the drawing area.Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. select 1 : 50. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and select 1. For Scale. select Floor Plan. For View. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family.Sidewall : 450 x 200 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

and select 1.11 Press Esc. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. Creating a Legend | 333 . click next to the top diffuser. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 14 In the drawing area. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER.

open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 21 Press Esc. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 26 Press Esc. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component.DROP and its text note. The selected detail lines are now thin. 27 While pressing Ctrl. and then press Esc. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 24 Select the component’s break line.

36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. 34 Using the method learned previously. and then click Modify.MECHANICAL LEGEND. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. Creating a Legend | 335 . double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. 35 Change the text on the right to N.30 Select Spot Elevation . enter E. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. and then click Modify. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down.

41 Close the file with or without saving it.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 40 Press Esc. 336 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .39 With the viewport still selected. and select Title w Line .

Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m. and text. A drafting view using detail components. A detail callout that references another view. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser .Detailing 15 In this lesson. 337 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. detail groups. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. indicating that it’s the active view. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted.113 East elevation view. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. click Training Files.

Next. 8 Using the same method. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. select each of the 2 panelboards. 5 In the drawing area. 4 On the Options Bar.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and click to place it. clear Leader. and then modify and align the views.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet.113 East on the sheet. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. place Power Riser . Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. 7 Drag the Power Riser . 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

right-click. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339 . and click Deactivate View. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left.9 Press Esc. under Identity Data. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. giving the appearance of a single view. 12 Select the Level 1 line. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. 13 Right-click. and click Activate View. select the 113 North view. and click OK. for Title on Sheet. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view.

and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. you add wiring to the diagram. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. and select Title w Line . right-click. 21 Using the drag control. select the 113 East elevation view.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 19 Select the Level 1 line. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. 22 Press Esc. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . In the next exercise. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. right-click. and click Activate View. as shown. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.

notice that there are no snaps active. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area.rvt.Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . As you draw. 2 Close the Project Browser. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. click New. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . 8 On the Options Bar. for Name. as shown. for Line Weight. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. verify that Chain is selected. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category.113 North view. enter Electrical Power. 9 Beginning at the transformer. and click OK. indicating that it’s the active view. In the Line Styles dialog. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. Under Modify Subcategories. In the New Subcategory dialog. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_m. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. expand Lines.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. and then click OK. select 6. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). In the left pane of the Open dialog.

for Offset. enter 3mm. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 11 Using the same method. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as shown.10 Press Esc. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset.

you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. TIP When you use the Trim tool. so that the result is as shown. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line.

21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as shown. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once.

31 While pressing Ctrl. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . 33 On the Options Bar. select Multiple. 28 Click above the cap. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 29 Click Modify.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text.25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). and select 1. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader.

346 | Chapter 15 Detailing .35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 36 Press Esc.

0. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. and press Enter. enter 7. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. and then press Esc. Press Esc. 40 Press Esc. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. change the length of the bottom line to 3. click on the length dimension value. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. for Offset.Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. enter 12. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. enter 3. 44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. Using the same method. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. you can ensure that they stay together. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . and press Enter. 42 On the Options Bar. 39 Move the cursor to the right. You enter exact values for each line length.

49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. and then press Esc. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. while pressing Ctrl. 47 In the drawing area. 51 Using the method learned previously. 52 Select the detail group. select all 3 lines. 54 Select the group. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. TP-2B. enter Ground. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. expand Groups ➤ Detail. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. and click OK.45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. 46 In the Project Browser. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Name. 50 With the group selected. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group.

Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). In later exercises. and will place it on sheet E01. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view.

click Home. select 3D Views. Back. 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■ For Show Type.rvt. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_m. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. 8 On the ViewCube. and click Rename. 6 In the Rename View dialog. and Left sides converge. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. for Name. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and then press Esc. and double click Typical Make Up Air. 5 Right-click the copy. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 2 Zoom in to view the section. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. Walkthroughs. Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser. and then click the corner where the Top. 3 Select the section box. click Training Files. 7 Right-click the ViewCube. and click OK. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. and click Apply View Template.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. expand Documentation ➤ HVAC . 4 In the Project Browser.Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section).

Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components.■ ■ Under Names. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Click OK. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. select 3D HVAC Iso. 15 Using the same method. 14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. Typical. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right). Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Move the cursor down and to the left. and click to specify the second leader point.

select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. as shown. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 19 Complete the text labels. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area.18 Press Esc. under Extents. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. select Crop Region Visible. 23 Click on the crop region. and then click OK. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. and under Extents. as shown. To rotate and reposition a text label. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.

29 Right click the view. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. and click OK. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. and click Deactivate View. 33 Right-click the view. clear Crop Region Visible. specify 1 : 2 for the scale. select Crop View and Section Box. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . and under Extents. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. Use detail lines to create a detail group. 32 In the Instance Properties. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. Place a detail component. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet.25 Click OK. and click Activate View.rvt. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. click Training Files. 30 On the View Control Bar. scroll down. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click View Properties.

select Documentation. Click OK. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 3 In the Project Browser. as the rectangle start point. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). 12 On the Element panel. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. click the point at the top of the drain. right-click the view name. as shown. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. select 1 : 5.Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. select Plumbing. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. For Scale. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. Click OK. 9 Zoom in to the component. for Sub-Discipline. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 13 In the drawing area. and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. For View Classification. and click Properties.

15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. select C. 21 In the drawing area.I.P. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . 18 With the filled region still selected. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. and click OK. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. Concrete. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Select 1. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region.14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140. and then press Esc. for Type. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. 22 Click Modify.

28 Click Modify. 30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 34 Press Esc. select Multiple. (Line). 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 31 On the Options Bar. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. and then click to select them. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain.Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. select the filled region. 23 In the drawing area. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary.

and then select the side of the slab above the line.35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. and then press Esc. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 40 Click Finish Region. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 38 Pan to the other end of the slab.

44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. draw wide detail lines as shown. as shown. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down.Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and then click to select them. (Rectangle). 45 Using the method learned previously. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. press Tab to highlight the chain. enter Flashing Membrane_F.D. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 49 Click Modify. select the Flashing Membrane group. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. and click OK. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. 52 In the Create Group dialog. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. for Name. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down..

57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. as shown. 55 Press Esc. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. as shown. and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge.54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. 58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. press Spacebar twice. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. 61 Using the same method.

66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. select Leader and Free End. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 64 Press Esc twice. as shown.62 Press Esc twice. 67 On the Options Bar. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline.

Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 71 Click Modify. and click to specify the text insertion point. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. and click to specify the second leader point. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 78 Move the cursor to the left. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 80 Press Esc twice. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 72 If necessary.A2 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. select 15000 (Division 15 .Mechanical) ➤ 15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150. 81 Select the text note. and then click OK. 76 To select the leader start point.70 In the Keynotes dialog.

83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing .82 Continue annotating the detail. as shown. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 84 Using the following image as a guide.

90 Press Esc. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. 88 In the drawing area. open P103 . 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. and then press Esc twice. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. and click to place it.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. select the view title.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser.

364 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful